Canon | EOS 1000D | User manual | Canon EOS 1000D User manual

Canon EOS 1000D User manual
‫‪アテ‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻧﺸﻜﺮﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪EOS DIGITAL REBEL XS/EOS 1000D‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ ١٠,١٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ‪ EOS‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺷﺎﻫﺪ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺩﻳﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺩﺙ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ )ﺹ ‪ ١٨٦‬ﻭ‪ (١٨٧‬ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺹ ‪ ١٢‬ﻭ‪.(١٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻀﺎﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﻈﺮ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪﻙ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬
‫ﻷﻱ ﻏﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﻠﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﻈﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺧﻼﻓﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ ،SDHC‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ "ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ" ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻻ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫)ﻣﻊ ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭﻏﻄﺎء ﻟﻠﺠﺴﻢ(‬
‫ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫‪EW-100DB III‬‬
‫‪EOS DIGITAL‬‬
‫‪Solution Disk‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LP-E5‬‬
‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻐﻄﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪*LC-E5E/LC-E5‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪IFC-200U‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪VC-100‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ )ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺐ(‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ )‪(EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk‬‬
‫ﻭﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LC-E5‬ﺃﻭ ‪) .LC-E5E‬ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ‪ LC-E5E‬ﻣﺰﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺴﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺮﺍء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺃﻳًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫>‪<6‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫>‪ : <U> <V‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ >‪.<S‬‬
‫>‪<0‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٦‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ‪ٍ ٦‬‬
‫‪ : 8 ،9 ،0‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ٤‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٠‬‬
‫)ﺹ**(‬
‫‪ :‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺼﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻧﺼﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫ﻳُﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪.EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺘﺪﺋﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻼﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫‪٦٩‬‬
‫‪٩٥‬‬
‫‪١٠٧‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪١٢٣‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪١٣٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪١٥١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪١٦١‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ ‪٣ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ‪٤ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ‪٥ ..................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪١٠ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪١٢ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪١٤ .....................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ‪١٦ ................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪٢٤ ..................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ‪٢٦ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٢٧ ........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪٢٩ .................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪٣٠ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‪٣١ .............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻓﻜﻬﺎ‪٣٣ ..................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪٣٥ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪٣٦ ......................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪٣٨ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪٤٠ ...........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪٤٢ .................................................................................... LCD‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ‪٤٤ .................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻣﺔ ‪٤٦ .................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ‪٤٧ ..............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ‪٤٨ ...............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ‪٤٩ .................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ‪٥٠ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻴﻞ ‪٥١ .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪٥٢ .........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪٥٣ ................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٥٤ ........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪٥٦ ......................................................................................(AE‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪٥٧ ....................................................................................................ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ‪٥٨ ...............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪٦٠ ...........................................................................(AF‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪٦١ ........................................................................ (AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ‪٦٣ ...................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪٦٤ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٦٧ ...................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪٦٩‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪٧٠ .........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ‪٧٢ ....................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ ‪٧٥ .......................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪٧٦ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪٧٧ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪٧٨ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪٨٠ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪٨٢ ...............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٨٥ ..................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪٨٧ ..................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪٨٨ ....................................................................................... (AE‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪٨٩ ..................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪٩٠ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪٩٢ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪٩٤ ...................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫‪٩٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪٩٦ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪٩٨ .....................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٩٩ ...............................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪١٠٢ .......................................................‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪١٠٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪١٠٨ ..............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ‪١٠٨ ..............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪١٠٨ ..................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪١٠٨ .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪١٠٩ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪١٠٩ ......................................................................................LCD‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪١١٠ ..............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١١٢ ..............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪١١٣ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ‪١١٤ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪١١٥ ...................................................................................... LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪١١٥ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪١١٦ ...................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪١١٨ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪١١٩ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪١٢١ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪١٢٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٢٤ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮ ‪١٢٦ ......................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪١٢٦ .......................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪١٢٧ .....................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪١٢٨ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٢٩ .......................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٣٠ .........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪١٣١ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪١٣٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪١٣٤ .....................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪١٣٦ ..............................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪١٤٣ ........................................................................ (DPOF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ( ‪١٤٦ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‪١٤٧ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪١٥١‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪١٥٢ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪١٥٤ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ‪١٦٠ .......................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪١٦١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪١٦٢ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪١٦٣ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪١٦٤ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪١٦٦ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪١٦٨ ......................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪١٧٠ .............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ ‪١٧٢ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪١٧٥ .........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪١٧٦ .......................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪١٧٨ ..........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ‪١٩١ ..............................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤٣‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٦٣ ،٥٠ ،٤٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻨﻔﺴﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٥٣‬‬
‫)‪ j‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٧٠‬‬
‫)‪s‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‬
‫ﺗﺒﻬﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٧٢‬‬
‫)‪f‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٧٨‬‬
‫‪) ٥٢‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‬
‫)‪ i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﺎﻓﺘﺔ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪) ٥٨ ،٥٧ ،٤٤‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٥٢‬‬
‫)‪ 7‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٧٥‬‬
‫)ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ Í LCD‬ﺹ ‪٩٦‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٦٧‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٦٤‬‬
‫)‪(1 ،83 ،73‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٦٤‬‬
‫)‪(86 ،76‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٦١‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٦٠ ،٥٠‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٥٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٢٤‬‬
‫)‪ H‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ(‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٢٩‬‬
‫)‪ K‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٣٠‬‬
‫)‪ L‬ﺣﺬﻑ(‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٢٨‬‬
‫)ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٠٩‬‬
‫)ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪(LCD‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٣٣‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ(‬
‫)‪ S‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬
‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪(AI Servo‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫)‪ x‬ﻋﺮﺽ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺴﻘﻄﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺎء ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺳﻘﻄﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻋﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ .Canon‬ﺟﻔﻒ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺎء ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺼﺮﻫﺎ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻟﻪ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻛﺎﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻳُﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻣﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺧﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺻﻄﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺂﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺂﻛﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻭﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻟﺒﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﺲ ﺑﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻐﻠﻖ ﻭﺩﻋﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻜﻴﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﺒﺨﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﺒﻀﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻛﻴﻤﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺂﻛﻞ ﻛﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺒﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺁﺗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺪﻯ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺤﺼﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺗﺘﺨﻄﻰ ‪ ٪ ٩٩,٩٩‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ٪ ٠,٠١‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﻄﻼ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺇﻟﺦ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻮﻫﺞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺑﻘﺎﻳﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﺒﻀﻌﺔ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻟﻪ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻗﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺲ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗُﻔﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﻜﺐ ﺃﻱ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤُﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺜﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻷﻳﺔ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻃﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺧﺪﺵ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺨﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻻ ﻳُﻌﺪ ﻋﻴﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٦‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٤‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪EF‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪EF-S‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ ،EF-S‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<AF‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣١‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻚ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) .<1‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٧‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٩‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<1‬‬
‫)ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ(‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٤٤‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٠٨‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪) .<x‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٣٠‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻗﺴﻢ "ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ" )ﺣﺘﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٥٤‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ )ﺹ ‪(٢٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١١٦/٥٨‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺹ ‪(٢٧‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪) EF‬ﺹ ‪(٣٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪) EF-S‬ﺹ ‪(٣٣‬‬
‫>‪ <Z‬ﺯﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٥٧‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪(٤‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(١٦٦‬‬
‫>‪ <V‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺹ ‪(٤٩‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٣٧‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٢٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٥٣/٥٩‬‬
‫>‪ <D‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٥٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺾ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٣٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٢١ ،٩٤‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ )ﺹ ‪(٧٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ )ﺹ ‪(١٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺑﻮﺱ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS lens‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪) Video OUT‬ﺹ ‪(١٢٨‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺹ ‪(١٦٤‬‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٦٢‬‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٣٤‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٤٧ ،١٣٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‬
‫‪EW-60C‬‬
‫)ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ ‪ ٥٨‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٣٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٣٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ )ﺹ ‪(١٣‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٣٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫>‪ <O‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٧٨/٧٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء )ﺹ ‪(٣٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ )ﺹ ‪(١٦٥‬‬
‫>‪ <A/I‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪/‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٤١ ،١٢٦/١٢٤/٨٩/٨٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫>‪ <B‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ )ﺹ ‪(١٤١/١١٣ ،٤٢‬‬
‫>‪ <S/u‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪/(AF‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ )ﺹ ‪(١٤١ ،١٢٦/٦١‬‬
‫>‪ <M‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٣٨‬‬
‫>‪<l/B‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٩٠/١٤٨ ،١٣٩‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٣١‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )ﺹ ‪(١٦٣‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) LCD‬ﺹ ‪(١٠٩ ،٣٨‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ )ﺹ ‪(٣٢‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٢٦‬‬
‫>‪ <x‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺹ ‪(٥٤‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٢٦‬‬
‫>‪ <L‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ )ﺹ ‪(١٣٠‬‬
‫>‪ <0‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪/‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪(٤٢/٣٨‬‬
‫>‪ <S‬ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ )ﺹ ‪(٣٨‬‬
‫>‪ <Wq‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )ﺹ ‪(١٢٥/٧٧‬‬
‫>‪ <XA‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٦٧‬‬
‫>‪ <Yi/j‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺹ ‪(٦٣ ،٥٣‬‬
‫>‪ <ZE‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪) (AF‬ﺹ ‪(٦٠‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٣١‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٦٩‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪(٥٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(٩٠‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ W‬ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ E‬ﻇﻞ‬
‫‪ R‬ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‬
‫‪ Y‬ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ U‬ﺿﻮء ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪ I‬ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ O‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(٩٢‬‬
‫‪ B‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(٩٣‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٧٨‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪) (AEB‬ﺹ ‪(٨٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(٧٩‬‬
‫‪ y‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ‪Speedlite‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺹ ‪(٦٣ ،٥٣‬‬
‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ q‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٦٠‬‬
‫‪ X‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪AI Focus‬‬
‫‪ Z‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪AI Servo‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٧٧‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ‬
‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ e‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٢٨‬‬
‫‪zxcn‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٦٧‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺹ ‪(٦٤‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪73‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫‪83‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪/‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪74‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪/‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫‪84‬‬
‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪76‬‬
‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫‪86‬‬
‫‪RAW‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪+RAW 1+73‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪<.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫>‪<Z‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫>‪ <o‬ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫>‪ <A‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AEB‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫>‪ <D‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺟﺎﻫﺰ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪ ISO‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫>‪ <0‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AEB‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫>‪ <e‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫)ﻓﻼﺵ ‪(FP‬‬
‫>‪ <d‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫)‪ (FEB‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫>‪ <y‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(FuLL‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(Err‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(Card‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪(FEL‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ )‪(buSY‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ )‪(D buSY‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻨﺤﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﺰﻳ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥٦‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٧٠‬‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٧٢‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٧٥‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪ : 8‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٧٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻓﻌﻠﻪ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ ﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٤٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ : 2‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٤٧‬‬
‫‪ :3‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٤٨‬‬
‫‪ : 4‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٤٩‬‬
‫‪ :5‬ﺭﻳﺎﺿﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥٠‬‬
‫‪ : 6‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥١‬‬
‫‪ :7‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥٢‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LC-E5‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﻄﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻼﻣﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ‪ -‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻻ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴًﺎ ﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LC-E5E‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﺮﺭﻩ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﺑﺰﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺭﺗﺨﺎء ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﺨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺑﺰﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(١٦٥‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪LC-E5‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺣﻦ ‪LC-E5‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺮﺩ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺣﻦ ‪LC-E5E‬‬
‫‪LC-E5E‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲء‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻴًﺎ ﻭﺳﺘﻔﻘﺪ ﻃﺎﻗﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺮﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺮﻁ ﻭﻗﺼﺮ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﺼﺎﻥ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺪ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﺗﺮﺩﺩ ‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﻠﺒﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺟﻬﺪ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪.LP-E5‬‬
‫ﺧﺼﻴﺼﺎ ﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E5‬ﻣُﺼﻤﻤﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E5‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻗﺼﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻪ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻨﻜﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٢٩‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫>‪ : <1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫>‪ : <2‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <1‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<2‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﻌﺮﺽ >‪ .<f‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﻻﻳﺰﺍﻝ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ )ﺹ ‪(٣٧‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ >‪ <2>/<1‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ .<f‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪[5Auto power off‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(١٠٩‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <2‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫)ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ (...‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[Recording ...‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<1‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪z‬‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻗﺪﺭ ٍ‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺳﺘﻨﻔﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ °٢٣‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ °٧٣ /‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ °٠‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ °٣٢ /‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫]ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ[‬
‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪٪٥٠‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫‪٥٠٠‬‬
‫‪٦٠٠‬‬
‫‪٥٠٠‬‬
‫‪٤٠٠‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E5‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪ CIPA‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ )ﻣﻊ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٠٠‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﻭ‪ ٤‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺐ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺳﻴﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Date/Time‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫]‪.[6‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪Date/‬‬
‫‪) [Time‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) .<0‬ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[OK‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻔﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Language‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫]‪.[6‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫]‪) [Language‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ( )ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ(‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻟﻚ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻭﺣﺮﻛﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<1‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [1Shoot w/o card‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮﻙ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗﻨﺴﻰ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(١٠٨‬‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪"Recording...‬‬
‫)ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ (...‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺒﺮﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻏﻠﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻣﻴﻀﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺍءﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻣﻴﻀﻪ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪) .٠٠٠١‬ﺹ ‪(١٠١‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻓﺄﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪ .(٤٠‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ٍﺬ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻓﻜﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪EF-S‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪EF‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻷﻏﻄﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺯﻝ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻭﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ EF-S‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪ EF-S‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪ ،EF-S‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ EF‬ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺣﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ )ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻓﻜﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣًﺎ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻜﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ١,٦‬ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ ١٤٫٨ × ٢٢٫٢‬ﻣﻠﻢ‪×٠٫٨٧/‬‬
‫‪ ٠٫٥٨‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫)‪ ٢٤ × ٣٦‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٠٫٩٤ × ١٫٤٢ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ُﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS‬ﻛﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ‪ IS‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) IS‬ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻗﺎﺭﺏ ﻣﺘﺄﺭﺟﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <f‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<g‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) IS‬ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪) IS‬ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) IS‬ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) IS‬ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻴ ًﻨﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻮﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ ١٠) E‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‪ ،‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻟﻒ ﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣًﺎ ﺇﺻﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺫﺭﺍﻋﻴﻚ ﻭﻣﺮﻓﻘﻴﻚ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺟﺴﺪﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻭﺟﻬﻚ ﻭﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻗﺪﻣﻴﻚ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٩٥‬‬
‫‪٣٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪(0) .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗُﻌﺮﻑ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺛﺒﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ً‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﺄﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<M‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ >‪ <S‬ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <0‬ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ >‪<M‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ >‪<0‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ >‪<S‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫* ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [9/7/2‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ 9‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪) .‬ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﺘﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ً‬
‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺳﺮﺩ ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٦٨‬‬
‫‪٣٩‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Format‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Format‬‬
‫)ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <L‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ]‪Low level‬‬
‫‪) [format‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ( >‪ <X‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء(‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺪﻣﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤١‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ )ﺹ ‪ .(٣٧‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <B‬ﺃﻭ >‪ .<0‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ً‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ .<M‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<x‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [5LCD off/on btn‬ﺯﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،(LCD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(١١٥‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ً‬
‫‪٤٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻓﻌﻠﻪ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺭﺩﻳﺌﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻃﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ )ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻷﺳﺎ‬
‫ﺍ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣ ّ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(١٥٦‬‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ ،(AF‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺟﺴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻌﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫ﺻﻔﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﻨﻴﺮ ﺿﻮء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘُﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﺒﺜﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻠﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪ (١٦٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ .(AF‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﻨﻴﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪(.<o‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﻨﻴﺮ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ (.<o‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻧﺒﺜﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎءﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺷﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺷﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺮﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ .(AF‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪ ١٣,١/‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻗﺎﺗﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ٥‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪ ١٦,٤/‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻇﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﺗﻤًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺴﺒﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻇﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪ ٣,٣/‬ﺃﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺯﻟﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺎ ًﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ( ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ "ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ"‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻲ >‪.(<5‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ(؛ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪﻩ )ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AI Servo‬ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪ .‬ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <2‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺒﻬﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﺯﺍ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺠﺎﻧﺲ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺭﻭﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺧﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻤﻞء ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺮ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‪) .‬ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ ٣‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٧‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <3‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ( ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻻﺣﺘﻮﺍء ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻭﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻫﻮًﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﺗﺴﺎﻋﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻀﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻼ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <6‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻼ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(٥١‬‬
‫ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪٤٨‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﻫﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫>‪) <4‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ(‪ .‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﺮﻳﺔ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫>‪ ٠٫٢٥ 4‬ﻡ‪ ٠٫٨/‬ﻗﺪﻡ<‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ >‪) <V‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ( ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪.<o‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﻇﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﺗﻤًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺑﺘﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺳﻴﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٩‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ‪ -‬ﺳﻮﺍء ﺃﻛﺎﻥ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺭﺍﻛﻀﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻃﻔﻼ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <5‬ﺭﻳﺎﺿﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪.<o‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ )ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ ٣‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ( ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ُﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٠‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <6‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺣﺎﻣﻼ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻼ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪ ١٦,٤/‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺸﺨﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﺮﺯ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ٥‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪ ١٦,٤/‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ً‬
‫>‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥١‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <7‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺒﺮﺯ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻤُﻀﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻤﻮﻉ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ُﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻼ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻔﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ً‬
‫ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٢‬‬
‫‪ j‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<Yij‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫‪ :l‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪) N‬ﺹ ‪(٩٤‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ :q‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪<V‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )‪ ٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (١٠‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺃﺧﺬﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ )ﺑﺎﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗُﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪ ،<q‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﺘﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ )ﺹ ‪.(٥٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(١٦٥‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺿﻮء ﺷﺎﺭﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪ (٤٦‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪﺋﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<Yij‬‬
‫‪٥٣‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻷﺑﺴﻂ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٢٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪.<Y‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﻝ )ﺃﻗﺪﻡ( ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪.<Z‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪ +‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<x‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺩﻳﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <d‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﺇﺿﻔﺎء ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <d‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ <d‬ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٧٠‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <d‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ‪ AE‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫‪ :d‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳُﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪.(AE‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<d‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪ (٥٧‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ )ﺹ ‪ .(٥٨‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ ، <d‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪) <I‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪) .‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ )‪ ،(30" 3.5‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪ (٥٧‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪ .(٥٨‬ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ )‪ ،(4000 22‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫‪ :Z‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISON‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء( ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<Z‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ]‪) [ISO speed‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.(ISO‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫>‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ(‬
‫‪٢٠٠/١٠٠‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﻤﺴﺔ‬
‫‪٨٠٠/٤٠٠‬‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻠﺒﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎء‬
‫‪١٦٠٠‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(٥٨‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ISO 100 - 800‬ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫>‪) <a‬ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .ISO 400‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺒﺒًﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٧‬‬
‫‪ D‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫>‪ ،<d‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )‪ ٦٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ ٢٠٠/١ -‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<D‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <D‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪"DbuSY‬‬
‫)ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫]‪) [BUSYD‬ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪.<D‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫‪٥٨‬‬
‫]ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺘﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻡ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ[‬
‫‪ ٥٥ -EF-S18‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪f/3.5-5.6 IS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪ ١٨ :‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ٥٥ :‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫‪١٠٠‬‬
‫‪١٢٫١ - ٣٫٣ / ٣٫٧ - ١‬‬
‫‪٧٫٥ - ٣٫٣ / ٢٫٣ - ١‬‬
‫‪٢٠٠‬‬
‫‪١٧٫٤ - ٣٫٣ / ٥٫٣ - ١‬‬
‫‪١٠٫٨ - ٣٫٣ / ٣٫٣ - ١‬‬
‫‪/٤٠٠‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪٢٤٫٣ - ٣٫٣ / ٧٫٤ - ١‬‬
‫‪١٥٫١ - ٣٫٣ / ٤٫٦ - ١‬‬
‫‪٨٠٠‬‬
‫‪٣٤٫٤ - ٣٫٣ / ١٠٫٥ - ١‬‬
‫‪٢١٫٧ - ٣٫٣ / ٦٫٦ - ١‬‬
‫‪١٦٠٠‬‬
‫‪٤٨٫٩ - ٣٫٣ / ١٤٫٩ - ١‬‬
‫‪٣٠٫٥ - ٣٫٣ / ٩٫٣ - ١‬‬
‫‪ D‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺘﻌﺪ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪ ٣,٣/‬ﺃﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺘﻤًﺎ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺗﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء‬
‫>‪.<5> <7> <3‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Red-eye On/‬‬
‫‪) [Off‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲء‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺮﺯ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٩‬‬
‫‪ :E‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪N(AF‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻴﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<ZE‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ]‪) [AF mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫‪) X‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) 9‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪(AI Focus‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) One-Shot AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ( ﺃﻭ ‪) AI Servo AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ً .(AI Servo‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) One-Shot AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ( ﺃﻭ ‪AI‬‬
‫‪) Servo AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.(AI Servo‬‬
‫* ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) AI Servo AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،(AI Servo‬ﺳﺘُﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻴﺮ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ‪ AI‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﺎء ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻨﺎﻋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫)‪) Z (AI Servo AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪(AI Servo‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻴﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪<o‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٠‬‬
‫‪ S‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪N(AF‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ >‪) <d‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( ﻭ>‪ <s‬ﻭ>‪ <f‬ﻭ>‪ ،<a‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺣﻴﺜﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<S‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ ،(AF‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦١‬‬
‫‪ S‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪N (AF‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻦ ً‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺴﺒﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.AI Servo‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﻭﻳﻨﻴﺮ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <MF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٢‬‬
‫‪ i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻃﻔﻠﻚ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻳﺮﻛﺾ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<Yij‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ >‪.<i‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪<i‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(٦٤‬‬
‫‪ ٣ :‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫‪ ١٫٥ :‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ *** : 73+1‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،AI Servo‬ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺳﻴﺘﻄﻠﺐ ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ])‪) [7Custom Functions (C.Fn‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(؛ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫]‪) [High ISO speed noise reduction‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ( )ﺹ ‪(١٥٥‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [1: On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،AI Servo‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﻄﺊ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٣‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ )‪ ١٠,١‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٥,٣‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٢,٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ( ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Quality‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺿﻤﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Quality‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Quality‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ )***‪ (M‬ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ )****‪(****x‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ]***[‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻭ‪ 73+1‬ﻛﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫‪73‬‬
‫‪83‬‬
‫‪74‬‬
‫‪84‬‬
‫‪76‬‬
‫‪86‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪73+1‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫‪ ١٠,١‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫)‪(10M‬‬
‫‪ ٥,٣‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫)‪(5.3M‬‬
‫‪ ٢,٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫)‪(2.5M‬‬
‫‪ ١٠,١‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫)‪(10M‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫)ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫***‬
‫‪٥١٤‬‬
‫‪٣٫٨‬‬
‫***‬
‫‪٩٨٢‬‬
‫‪٢٫٠‬‬
‫***‬
‫‪٨٥٩‬‬
‫‪٢٫٣‬‬
‫***‬
‫‪١٦٣٠‬‬
‫‪١٫٢‬‬
‫***‬
‫‪١٤٧٤‬‬
‫‪١٫٣‬‬
‫***‬
‫‪٢٨١٦‬‬
‫‪٠٫٧‬‬
‫***‬
‫‪١٩٩‬‬
‫‪٩٫٨‬‬
‫***‬
‫‪١٤٣‬‬
‫‪٣٫٨+٩٫٨‬‬
‫* ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ Canon‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO 100‬ﻭﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺹ ‪ ،(٦٣‬ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬
‫‪٦٤‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻮﺻﻰ‬
‫‪٤٢x٢٩٫٧) A3‬ﺳﻢ‪١٦٫٥x١١٫٧/‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ( ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ 73‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪73‬‬
‫‪83‬‬
‫‪ 83‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪.73+1‬‬
‫‪٢٩٫٧x٢١) A4‬ﺳﻢ‪/‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪74 1+73‬‬
‫‪84‬‬
‫‪١١٫٧x٨٫٣‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫‪76‬‬
‫‪86‬‬
‫‪١٧٫٨x١٢٫٧‬ﺳﻢ‪٧٫٠x٥٫٠/‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٫٨x١٠‬ﺳﻢ‪٥٫٨x٣٫٩/‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 7‬ﻭ‪8‬؟‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺴﻢ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪7‬ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،8‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻃﻔﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺬﺕ ﻋﺪ ًﺩﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺇﻻ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ؟‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ،9‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪9‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻛـ "‪ "9‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻛﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪1‬؟‬
‫ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫"ﺣﻮﻝ ‪ "1‬ﻭ"ﺣﻮﻝ ‪ "73+1‬ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪ ،1‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻫﻮ ‪ JPEG‬ﺷﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪1‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 73‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ 1‬ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪) Digital Photo Professional‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻻ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻭﺗﺒﺮﺯ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ 1‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻳﺘﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ ،1‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻋﺪﺓ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺄﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪ ،(٩٠‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪.(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪73+1‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ 73+1‬ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 1‬ﻭ‪ 73‬ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪73‬ﻛﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ ،73+1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻫﻮ "‪ ،"CR2‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪73‬ﻫﻮ‬
‫"‪."JPG‬‬
‫‪1 image‬‬
‫‪CR2 . 0001‬‬
‫‪73 image‬‬
‫‪JPG . 0001‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺹ ‪ (١٥٦‬ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻭ‪.73+1‬‬
‫‪٦٦‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺴﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<XA‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Picture Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪) Standard P‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Portrait Q‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻟﻄﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ]‪) [Color tone‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( )ﺹ ‪ ،(٨٣‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Landscape R‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻬﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<3‬‬
‫‪٦٧‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪N‬‬
‫‪) Neutral S‬ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ(‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻔﻀﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻄﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Faithful U‬ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ(‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻔﻀﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٥٢٠٠‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ ﻭﻟﻄﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Monochrome V‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ ،1‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Monochrome‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫]‪) [Monochrome‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ >‪ <0‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪) 3-user Def. 1 W‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪(٣-١‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻟﻸﻭﺿﺎﻉ ]‪) [Portrait‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [Landscape‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ( ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ )ﺹ ‪ .(٨٥‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ -‬ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ -‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٨‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻭﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻣﺰﻳ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺑﺘﻜﺎﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫>‪ <s> <f> <a> <8‬ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫>‪ ،<8‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺼﻞ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ "ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ"‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <d‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫< ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ >‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪ -‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٩‬‬
‫‪ :s‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺃﺛﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <s‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ( ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <s‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ‬
‫)ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ(‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫)ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<s‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ" ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺴﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﻮﻯ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ "‪ "0"5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٠,٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ""‪ "15‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٠‬‬
‫‪ :s‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ ١/٤٠٠٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١/٥٠٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺨﻠﻖ ﺃﺛﺮ ﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻃﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﺮﻛﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﺿﻔﺎء ﺍﻹﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ ١/٢٥٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١/٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻜﻬﺎ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺃﺛﺮ ﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻧﻬﺮ ﻣﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺎﻓﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻼ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١/١٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻐﻴﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯﺕ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﺎﺗﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻴﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١/٢٠٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧١‬‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <f‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ )ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﻮﻟﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <f‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺰ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<f‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪ ،(f‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪ ،(f‬ﻗﻠﺖ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ "‪ "00‬ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٢‬‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻬﺘﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺹ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻼ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻧﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﻤﻖ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﺎﻝ )ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻭﺧﻠﻒ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻤﻖ ﺿﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺿﺎﻕ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ ﺑﻌﻤﻖ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻐﻴﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯﺕ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﺗﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ""‪ ٣٠) "30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ "‪ ١/٤٠٠٠) "4000‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺧﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫‪٧٣‬‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻴﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٠٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ )ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻜﻬﺎ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Flash sync. speed in Av mode‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ (Av‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ])‪) [7Custom Functions (C.Fn‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ( )ﺹ ‪ (١٥٤‬ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪ ١/٢٠٠ :١) [1: 1/200sec. (fixed‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ((‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ )ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﻮﻟﺔ( ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ً f‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻣًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٤‬‬
‫‪ :a‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳُﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١/٢٠٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١/٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <a‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<a‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻀﺒﻄﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <O‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٢±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ >‪) <BULB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ(‪ .‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺩﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺹ ‪.(١٦٤‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﺸﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﺵ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Long exp. noise reduction‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ( ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ])‪) [7Custom Functions (C.Fn‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ (١٥٥‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [1: Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [2: ON‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺹ ‪.(١٥٦‬‬
‫‪٧٥‬‬
‫‪ :8‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<8‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪(0) .‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻣﻀﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻣﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺑﺘﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻣﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻟﻐﺔ ""‪ ،"30‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺎﺗﻢ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ .ISO‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻟﻐﺔ "‪ ،"4000‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻼ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺭﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺳﺘﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫>‪ <d‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٦‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪N‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﻋﺎﺩ ًﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<WQ‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ]‪) [Metering mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪) Evaluative metering q‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ(‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤُﻀﺎءﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Partial metering w‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺮﺯ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Center-weighted average metering e‬‬
‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪.(<a‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <O‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪) .‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <O‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪) .‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ(‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <O‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ‬
‫‪٧٨‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺟﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪N‬‬
‫‪ y‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻓﺌﺔ ‪.EX‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Flash exp comp‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Flash exp‬‬
‫‪) [comp‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪z‬‬
‫‪z‬‬
‫‪z‬‬
‫‪z‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪) .<Z‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪) .<Y‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <y‬ﻭﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫>‪ <y‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺟﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Auto Lighting Optimizer‬ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺹ ‪ (١٥٦‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫])‪ 7) [7Custom Functions (C.Fn‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ :0) [0: Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[1: Disable‬‬
‫)‪ :1‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٩‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪N‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺄﺧﺬ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ٍﺬ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺮﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪.(AEB‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ‬
‫)ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ(‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AEB‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻓﺘﺢ‬
‫)ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [AEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [AEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)‪.(AEB‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ ،(AEB‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AEB‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ )ﺹ ‪ ،(٦٣‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻭﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪N‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫<‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AEB‬ﻋﻠﻰ >‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)‪ (AEB‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <2‬ﻭﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AEB‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ >‪) <i‬ﺹ ‪ (٦٣‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻭﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AEB‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ >‪.<u‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻷﺧﺬ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻭﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AEB‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪.(AEB‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AEB‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫< ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<l‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ>‬
‫>‪ ،<q‬ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ )ﺹ ‪.(٥٣‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪.(AEB‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Auto Lighting Optimizer‬ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺹ ‪ (١٥٦‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫])‪ 7) [7Custom Functions (C.Fn‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪،[Enable :0‬‬
‫)‪ :0‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Disable :1‬‬
‫)‪ :1‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪.(AEB‬‬
‫‪٨١‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ]‪[Sharpness‬‬
‫)ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ﻭ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ(‪ .‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ]‪) [Monochrome‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺹ ‪.٨٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٨٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Picture Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Picture‬‬
‫‪) [Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪) Picture Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) Detail set.‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ ]‪[Sharpness‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪) Sharpness‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ(‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ‪ .E‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،E‬ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﻧﺴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ‪ .F‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،F‬ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪) Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ(‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺯﻫﻮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،G‬ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻋﺘﺪﺍﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺐ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،H‬ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Saturation‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،G‬ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺐ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،H‬ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺸﺒﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Color tone‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﻤﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ‪،G‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﻤﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺣﻤﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺐ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ‪،H‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Default set.‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ( ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٣‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٣‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Filter effect‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ( ﻭ]‪[Toning effect‬‬
‫)ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ]‪) [Sharpness‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ﻭ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Filter Effect‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ(‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺷﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﺍء ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫‪) N: None‬ﺑﻼ(‬
‫‪) Ye: Yellow‬ﺃﺻﻔﺮ(‬
‫‪) Or: Orange‬ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﻋﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﻗﺎﺗﻤﺔ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﻳﺒﺪﻭ‬
‫ﺇﺑﻬﺎﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻭﺏ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪) R: Red‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ(‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﻗﺎﺗﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺎﻗﻄﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪) G: Green‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ(‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺠﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ( ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪) Toning Effect‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ(‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ً‬
‫ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪) [N:None] :‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ(‬
‫]‪) [S:Sepia‬ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ( ]‪) [B:Blue‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ(‬
‫]‪) [P:Purple‬ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ( ]‪) [G:Green‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٤‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ]‪) [Portrait‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [Landscape‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫]‪) [User Def. 1‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [User Def. 2‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪ (٢‬ﺃﻭ ]‪[User Def. 3‬‬
‫)ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪.(٣‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Picture Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Picture‬‬
‫‪ ) [Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.Picture Style‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]* ‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) Detail set.‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Picture Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٥‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪N‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ ]‪[Sharpness‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ" ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٨٤-٨٢‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫]* ‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ *(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ )ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺿﻤﻦ ]* ‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ *( ‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ]* ‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ *(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٦‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪N‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ sRGB‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .Adobe RGB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.sRGB‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ sRGB‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Color space‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Color‬‬
‫‪) [space‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [sRGB‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [Adobe RGB‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪Adobe RGB‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،Adobe RGB ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪.(Exif 2.21) 2.0‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻟﻄﻴﻔﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ sRGB‬ﺑﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ ،(Exif 2.21) 2.0‬ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ ،Adobe RGB‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑـ "_‪"_MG‬‬
‫)ﺃﻭﻝ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺳﻔﻠﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ .ICC‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ICC‬ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٧‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪N (AE‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <A‬ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ "ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ"‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(0) .<A‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <A‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻴﺸﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <A‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٧٧‬‬
‫‪*q‬‬
‫‪we‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫)‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪.(AF‬‬
‫* ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪ (AE‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫‪٨٨‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪N‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻓﺌﺔ ‪.EX‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ‪ FE‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <D‬ﻟﻴﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻭﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪.<D‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(8) .<A‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪ "FEL‬ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪.<d‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪،<A‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ .<D‬ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﻭﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٤‬‬
‫‪٨٩‬‬
‫‪ :B‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪N‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪ (WB‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ً‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﺿﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﺎﺩ ًﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ >‪) <Q‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ >‪ ،<Q‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮء ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫>‪ <Q‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [White balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﻥ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ "‪ K***) "Approx. ****K‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬
‫)‪ : K‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ >>‪W> <E> <R> <Y‬‬
‫‪ <<U‬ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻤﻸ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻟﺺ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :B‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪N‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Custom WB‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Custom WB‬‬
‫)ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) SET‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،١‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[OK‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪ <O‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Monochrome‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( )ﺹ ‪،(٦٨‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫‪٩١‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻋﺘﺎﺩﻭﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻼﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [WB SHIFT/BKT‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪WB SHIFT/‬‬
‫‪) [BKT‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪z‬‬
‫‪z‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪G1 ،A2 :‬‬
‫‪z‬‬
‫‪z‬‬
‫‪z‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ " "‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ B‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ A‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ M‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ G‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ "‪"SHIFT‬‬
‫)ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻭﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [WB SHIFT/BKT‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ <2‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﺣ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ٥‬ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪ Mired‬ﻣﻦ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ :Mired) .‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٢‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺮﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪ .(WB-BKT‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٣±‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪B/A bias ±3 levels‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ؛‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ ،<6‬ﺳﺘﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ " "‬
‫" )‪ ٣‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ(‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ "‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ "‪"BKT‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [WB SHIFT/BKT‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .١ :‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭ‪ .٢‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ )‪ (B‬ﻭ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ )‪ (A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .١‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭ‪ .٢‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫)‪ (M‬ﻭ‪ .٣‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ )‪.(G‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻭﻳﻘﻞ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻠﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ])‪) [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(؛ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [High ISO speed noise reduction‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ( )ﺹ ‪ (١٥٥‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [1: On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ "‪ "BKT‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪N‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ )ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻬﺮﻳﺔ(‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺇﺟﺮﺍ ًء ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ])‪) [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Mirror lockup‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ( )ﺹ ‪ (١٥٧‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [1: Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ٍﺬ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ >‪ <l‬ﻣﻊ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻕ ﻭﺗﻠﻒ ﺳﺘﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪ +‬ﺯﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﺖ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺴﻤﻊ‬
‫ﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ >‪) <i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ "ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ"‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻣﺴﻜﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻚ ﻛﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪N‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Live View function settings‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Live View‬‬
‫‪) [function settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Live View shoot.‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Live View shoot.‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٩٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻌﻜﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺄﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪N‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(١٥٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻬﺘﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺄﻧﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﺤﻈﻴًﺎ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻠﻴًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ]‪) [6 LCD brightness‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ (LCD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺮﻭﺯﺍ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺹ ‪ (١٥٦‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Auto Lighting Optimizer‬ﻣ ّ‬
‫])‪) [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0: Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ﺑﺤﻴﺚ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪5 Auto‬‬
‫‪) [power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪) .‬ﺹ ‪ (١٠٩‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[5 Auto power off‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪.٪١٠٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(١٢٨‬‬
‫‪٩٧‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪N‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪ ،(١٠٤ ،١٠٢‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬
‫ﺣﻴﺜﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<L‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﻣﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ ١٠ :‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫‪٩٨‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<u‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪،<u‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﻣﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <u‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪N‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻼ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪.<d‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪<8‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪N‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪°٢٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ °٧٣ /‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ °٠‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪/‬‬
‫‪ °٣٢‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫]ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ[‬
‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪٪٥٠‬‬
‫‪٢٠٠‬‬
‫‪١٩٠‬‬
‫‪١٩٠‬‬
‫‪١٨٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E5‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪) CIPA‬ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻘﻠﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻧﺒﻮﺏ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ .TS-E‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪ (FE‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪Speedlite‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ]‪) [6 Live View function settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Grid display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ]‪[6 Live View function settings‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Metering timer‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪N‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<B‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪(RGB/‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺟﺎﻫﺰ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫< ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ >‬
‫ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫<‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ >‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫< ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ >‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ])‪) [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪AF during Live View‬‬
‫‪) [shooting‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( )ﺹ ‪ (١٥٧‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [1: Quick mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [2: Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ .(AF‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(٩٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪) Quick mode :١-٧‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪) (AF‬ﺹ ‪ ٦٠‬ﻭ‪ (٦١‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <f‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<X‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫‪١٠٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <S‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫>‪ <S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<A‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(٩٩‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ >‪ .<S‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<u‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ AI Servo‬ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،AI Focus‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،(٤‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ]‪) [Shutter/AE lock button‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪/‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( )ﺹ ‪ (١٥٨‬ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫])‪) [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[1: AE lock/AF‬‬
‫)ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪) RS-60E3‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪) Live mode :٢-٧‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ً (AF‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<f‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١٠٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.< > (AF‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(٩٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ >‪ <S‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﺜﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪ .‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<L‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<u‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺄﻧﻔﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪) RS-60E3‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺹ ‪ (٩٨‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(١٠٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <A‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﺪ ًﺩﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ]‪) [Shutter/AE lock button‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪/‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( )ﺹ ‪ (١٥٨‬ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫])‪) [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[1: AE lock/AF‬‬
‫)ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻔﺸﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻟﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻋﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﻧﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﺿﺎءﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻗﻮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻭﺑﻌﻴﺪ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺺ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﺎء ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺑﺘﻌﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٦‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٨‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٨‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٩‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) LCD‬ﺹ ‪(١٠٩‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ )ﺹ ‪(١١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ )ﺹ ‪(١١٢‬‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺹ ‪(١١٣‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١١٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪(١١٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪(١١٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(١١٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ )ﺹ ‪(١١٨‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١١٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ )ﺹ ‪(١٢١‬‬
‫‪١٠٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Beep‬ﺻﻔﻴﺮ( ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Shoot w/o‬‬
‫‪) [card‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪ .<0‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪) "Card‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻓﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Hold‬ﺇﺑﻘﺎء(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﺪﺓ ]‪) [Auto power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Review time‬‬
‫)ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪١٠٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﻘﻀﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫>‪ <0> <x> <B> <M‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<B‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪ LCD‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Auto power off‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[LCD brightness‬‬
‫)ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ (LCD‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪<U‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻭﺍﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻳﺸﺒﻪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺑﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠٠٠١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩٩٩٩‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.IMG_0001.JPG :‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[File numbering‬‬
‫)ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫]‪) [Continuous‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ(‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ .٩٩٩٩‬ﻭﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٠٠٠١‬ﻭ‪ ٩٩٩٩‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺮﻏﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻠﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻬﻴﺄﺓ ً‬
‫ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪Card -1‬‬
‫‪Card -2‬‬
‫‪0051‬‬
‫‪0052‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫‪١١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫]‪) [Auto reset‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ :‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٠٠٠١‬ﻣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ .٠٠٠١‬ﻭﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺮﻏﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻠﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺪء‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،٠٠٠١‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻬﻴﺄﺓ ً‬
‫ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪Card -1‬‬
‫‪0051‬‬
‫‪Card -2‬‬
‫‪0001‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫]‪) [Manual reset‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 0001‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ‪ .0001‬ﻭﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ‪ ،٩٩٩‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ]‪) [Folder number full‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﻜﺘﻤﻞ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻒ ‪ ،٩٩٩٩‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻻﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺄﺧﺮﻯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﻲ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ‪ ،RAW‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑـ "_‪ ."IMG‬ﻭﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫"‪ ".JPG‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ"‪ ".CR2‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.RAW‬‬
‫‪١١١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Auto rotate‬‬
‫)ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫]‪) On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ : [PD‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪[D‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،[PD‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Auto rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ؛ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ" ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٢٦‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.[D‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،[PD‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ B‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<B‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪/(٩٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٩٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٩٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥٩‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١١٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٠٨‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٠٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١١٨‬‬
‫‪١١٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ <d‬ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Clear settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[7‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Clear settings‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Clear all camera settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ])‪) [Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn‬ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<0‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Clear all camera settings‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪) AF mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪) One-Shot AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪Automatic selection‬‬
‫‪) AF point selection‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪) Metering mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪) Drive mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪q (Evaluative metering‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ((‬
‫‪u(Single shooting‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ((‬
‫‪Exposure compensation‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪) Canceled‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎء(‬
‫‪) AEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬
‫‪Flash exposure compensation‬‬
‫‪) ٠‬ﺻﻔﺮ(‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫‪Live View shooting‬‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬
‫‪) ٠‬ﺻﻔﺮ(‬
‫‪) Quality‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ(‬
‫‪73‬‬
‫‪) ISO speed‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪(ISO‬‬
‫‪) Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪) File numbering‬ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ(‬
‫‪) Continuous‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ(‬
‫‪) Color space‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‬
‫‪sRGB‬‬
‫‪) White balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫‪) Q (Auto WB‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪) WB correction‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫‪) Canceled‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎء(‬
‫‪) WB bracketing‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫‪) Canceled‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎء(‬
‫‪) Picture Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪) Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫* ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪ (٩٠‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(١١٩‬‬
‫‪١١٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) LCD‬ﺹ ‪ (٤٢‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[LCD off/on btn‬‬
‫)ﺯﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ (LCD‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪ .<0‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫]‪) [Shutter btn.‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‪ :‬ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[Shutter/DISP‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ‬
‫)ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪:(DISP/‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<0‬‬
‫]‪[Remains on‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪:‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Screen color‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Screen‬‬
‫‪) [color‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻭﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Flash control‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Flash control‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Flash firing‬ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Enable‬‬
‫)ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻭﻻ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺮﺯ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫]‪) [Built-in flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ(‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Flash mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Flash exp. comp‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٧٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [E-TTL II‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Shutter sync.‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [1st curtain‬ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ( ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻓﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [2nd curtain‬ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﺛﺮ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﻛﺎﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﻟﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻓﻼﺷﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻣﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٦‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪N‬‬
‫‪E-TTL II‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Evaluative‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Average‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺲ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳًﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻓﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [External flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ( ﺃﻭ ]‪External‬‬
‫‪) [flash C.Fn setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ‪.(580EX II‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪.Speedlite‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[External flash func. setting‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ( ﺃﻭ ]‪External‬‬
‫‪) [flash C.Fn setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ ،Speedlite‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٧‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <1‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<2‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻟﻤﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻵﻥ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Sensor cleaning‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Sensor cleaning‬‬
‫)ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Clean nowf‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Clean nowf‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻔﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻀﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺮﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [Clean nowf‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ( ﻣُﻌﻄﻼ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Auto cleaningf‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <1‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫>‪.<2‬‬
‫‪١١٨‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺰﻳﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Digital Photo‬‬
‫‪) Professional‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ( ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻟﺼﺎ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﺧﻼﻓﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﻀﺮ ﺟﺴﻤًﺎ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ )∞(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣُﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Dust Delete Data‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Dust Delete‬‬
‫‪) [Data‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٩‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪N‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺳﻢ ‪ ٣٠ -‬ﺳﻢ ‪ ٠,٧ /‬ﻗﺪﻡ ‪ ١ -‬ﻗﺪﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﻸ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺠﺴﻢ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﻻ ﻳﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺷﻜﻼ ﻣﻌﻴ ًﻨﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﻟﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.f/22‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺨﺒﺮﻙ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء "ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ" ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ‪ RAW‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻬﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﺩ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﻛﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٠‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ‬
‫ﻫﻮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻮﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Sensor cleaning‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Sensor‬‬
‫‪) [cleaning‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Clean manually‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Clean manually‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ( ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) ACK-E5‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ،AA‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢١‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪N‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﻌﺖ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫• ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺑﺤﺬﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻓﺮﺷﺎﺓ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻷﻥ ﻓﺮﺷﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺪﺵ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ ﻫﻮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗُﺪﺧﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﺘﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻧﻔﺦ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺠﻤﺪ ﺭﺫﺍﺫ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٢‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫"ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ" ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٣‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ H‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ(‬
‫ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳُﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<I‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <I‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪Í‬‬
‫‪Í‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١٢٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <S‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ ٩‬ﺻﻮﺭ ← )‪ ٤‬ﺻﻮﺭ( ← ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫‪ x‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ١٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ "ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ"‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪.<W‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ]‪1 image/10 images/100‬‬
‫‪) [images/Date‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ١٠/‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪/‬‬
‫‪ ١٠٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪.<U‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٥‬‬
‫‪ u/y‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<u‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪،<u‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ >‪ <S‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <I‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ .<x‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪°٠ ← °٢٧٠ ← °٩٠ :‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]‪) [5 Auto rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪.[zD‬‬
‫‪١٢٦‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ٍ ٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪Ð‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Auto play‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Auto play‬‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺟﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪[Loading image...‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ (...‬ﻟﺒﻀﻊ ٍ‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <0‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ( ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺧﺮﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ >‪ <1‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<x‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪) .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪ <2‬ﻭﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻼءﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [6 Video system‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ .‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٨‬‬
‫‪ K‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Protect images‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Protect‬‬
‫‪) [images‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <K‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪.<K‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ .<M‬ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪ ،(٤٠‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺹ ‪ ،(١٣٠‬ﺳﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ٍ‬
‫‪١٢٩‬‬
‫‪ L‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺟﻤﻴﻌًﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(١٢٩‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ 73+1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<L‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Erase‬ﻣﺴﺢ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <X‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﻛﺪﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [3Erase images‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Select and erase images‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ(‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ ،<V‬ﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <X‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<L‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [3Erase images‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[All images on card‬‬
‫)ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٠‬‬
‫‪ B‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ -‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪(RGB/‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻗﻬﺎ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫* ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ ،73+1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪.73‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣١‬‬
‫‪ B‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻔﻴﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) RGB‬ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ( ﻓﻲ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [3Histogram‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [Brightness‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺭﺳﻤًﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴًﺎ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ )ﺃﻏﻤﻖ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻭﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﺘﺢ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺴﻄﻮﻋﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﺘﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﻯ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻟﻠﻤﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [RGB‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺃﺯﺭﻕ(‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ RGB‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ )ﺃﻏﻤﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻭﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ ﻭﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﺘﺢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺸﺒﻌﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪) RGB‬ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺗﺸﺒﻌﻪ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٢‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٣٤‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ "‪ ،"wPictBridge‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻣﺰﻳ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪/http://canon.com/pictbridge‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪) (DPOF‬ﺹ ‪(١٤٣‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪ (DPOF‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ً‬
‫ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﻄﺎء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ )ﺹ ‪(١٦٧‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪١٣٤‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻑ >‪ <D‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <D‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗُﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪wPictBridge‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<x‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺭﻣﺰ >‪ <w‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <l‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ CP Direct‬ﺃﻭ ‪Bubble Jet‬‬
‫‪.Direct‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،٥‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻮﻃﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) .LCD‬ﺹ ‪(١٤٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ )ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ( ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) ACK-E5‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٥‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <w‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٣٨‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٤١‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﻧﻮﻋﻪ ﻭﺗﺨﻄﻴﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.١‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﻧﻮﻋﻪ ﻭﺗﺨﻄﻴﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫*ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١٣٦‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Paper settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Paper settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Y‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪،Canon‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ U‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Bordered‬ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺩ(‬
‫‪Borderless‬‬
‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ(‬
‫‪Borderedc‬‬
‫)ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺩ(‬
‫‪) xx-up‬ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫ﺳﺘﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻧُﺴﺦ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺳﻴﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ* ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ١٣×٩‬ﺳﻢ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﺣﺠﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ ٢‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٨‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٩‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٦‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢٠) 20-upc‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٣٥‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪ ،(DPOF‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ A4‬ﺃﻭ ‪) Letter‬ﺹ ‪.(١٤٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫‪ ٣٥) 35-upp‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ • ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ ٢٠) [20-upc‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ( ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ* ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫‪) Default‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ( ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻛﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪.Exif‬‬
‫‪١٣٧‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ >‪،<z‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪<e‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(١٤٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ "‪) "On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪) EOff‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪Exif‬‬
‫‪) EOn‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫‪) E Vivid‬ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪) E NR‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ( ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪0 B/W‬‬
‫)ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﺷﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪0 Cool tone‬‬
‫)ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻫﺎﺩﺋﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﻠﺰﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 0 Warm tone‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫)ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ‬
‫‪) z Natural‬ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪zNatural M‬‬
‫)ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ(‬
‫‪E Default‬‬
‫)ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫"‪) "Natural‬ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﻔﻮﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ "‪) "Natural‬ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﻳﻦ ]‪) [Brightness‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ( ﻭ]‪) [Adjust levels‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ( ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٤٠‬‬
‫‪١٣٨‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ >‪ <I‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ُ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ >‪ <R‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ >‪ <l‬ﻭﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <l‬ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ ﻫﻮ ‪ .١‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٤١‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Default‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ( ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﺎ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [Default‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ]‪) [Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [Stop‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٩‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ e‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٤‬ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،١٣٨‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <e‬ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ >‪ ،<z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<B‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫‪) Brightness‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Adjust levels‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ]‪) [Manual‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <B‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ >‪ .<h‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪<U‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﺎء )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (١٢٧‬ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٢٨‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(٢٥٥‬‬
‫‪) kBrightener‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬
‫ﻓﻌّﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﺩﺍﻛ ًﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Red-eye corr.‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء(‬
‫ﻓﻌّﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴﻦ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍ ]‪) [kBrightener‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ( ﻭ]‪) [Red-eye corr.‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Detail set.‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [Saturation‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ( ﻭ]‪) [Color tone‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( ﻭ]‪) [Color balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪ .‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ]‪) [Color balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ >‪ .<S‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ B‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ M‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ G‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ]‪) [Clear all‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٠‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺛﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻄﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Trimming‬ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ]‪) [Paper settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<I‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺻﻐﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ >‪ <S‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<B‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤١‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺻﻐﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺤﺒﺒًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻈﺮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺒﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ( ﻭﺣﺪﺩﺕ ]‪[Continue‬‬
‫)ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ( ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺛﺖ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪ <0‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺄﻧﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻞ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Paper Error‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫‪) Ink Error‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ(‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺧﺰﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ) Hardware Error‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ(‬
‫ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪) File Error‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ .PictBridge‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٢‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫]‪) [Print type‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Print order‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Print order‬‬
‫)ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Set up‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Set up‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ً‬
‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ]‪) [Print type‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ﻭ]‪) [File No.‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬
‫]‪) [File No.‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‬
‫‪١٤٣‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪Print type‬‬
‫)ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫‪) Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬
‫‪File No.‬‬
‫)ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪Standard‬‬
‫)ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Index‬ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ( ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Both‬ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﻋﻴﻬﺎ؛ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪On‬‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪On‬‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<7‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Sel.Image‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﺃﻭ ]‪All‬‬
‫‪) [image‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ﻭ]‪) [File No.‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻪ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ( ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.RAW‬‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ]‪) [Index‬ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ(‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ﻭ]‪[File No.‬‬
‫)ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٤‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪) Sel.Image‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <I‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<u‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <M‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫]‪) [Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ]‪) [Both‬ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Index‬ﻓﻬﺮﺱ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ >‪ <X‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪) All image‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Mark all on card‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪Clear‬‬
‫‪) [all on card‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ "‪"All image‬‬
‫)ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،PictBridge‬ﻻ ﺗﻄﺒﻊ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤٠٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٥‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪DPOF‬‬
‫)ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،PictBridge‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺰ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٣٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء "ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ" ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٥‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Print order‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ( ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Paper settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ(‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٣٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (١٣٨‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Bordered‬ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺩ(‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ]‪) [Adjust levels‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ(‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Manual‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ]‪[Resume‬‬
‫)ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ(‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﻗﻔﺖ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺙ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺛﺖ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٤٢‬‬
‫‪١٤٦‬‬
‫‪ d‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‬
‫‪ (EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ"‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻑ >‪ <D‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <D‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[EOS Utility‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪ [EOS Utility‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٧‬‬
‫‪ d‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪ ،[EOS Utility‬ﻓﺎﻧﻈﺮ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ" ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫)ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ]‪) [My Pictures‬ﺻﻮﺭﻱ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ]‪) [Pictures‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [All images‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<l‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ >‪ <l‬ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﻀﺎءً‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ]‪) [All images‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<l‬‬
‫‪) New images‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ(‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Transfer order images‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ(‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٨‬‬
‫‪ d‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫‪) Select & transfer‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻧﻘﻞ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫‪) Wallpaper‬ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﻭﺗﻨﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ً <0‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<l‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[OK‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Transfer order‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Transfer‬‬
‫‪) [order‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Sel.Image‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Sel.Image‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٩‬‬
‫‪ d‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫>‪ <X‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩٩٨‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻨﻘﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ]‪) [All image‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [All image‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Mark all on card‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪،<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩٩٨‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺪﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Clear all on card‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ( >‪ ،<0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗُﺪﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ؛ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻭﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 73+1‬ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪ JPEG‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <I‬ﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<u‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩٩٩‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ]‪) [All images‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(١٤٨‬‬
‫‪١٥٠‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥١‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪N‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ])‪[Custom Functions (C.Fn‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[7‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪[Custom‬‬
‫])‪) Functions (C.Fn‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪ ٣‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [7Clear settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪[Clear all Custom Func.‬‬
‫)‪) [(C.Fn‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(١١٤‬‬
‫‪١٥٢‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪) Exposure :١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪) Exposure level increments‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪) Flash sync. speed in Av mode‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪(Av‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪١٥٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪) Image :٢‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪) Long exposure noise reduction‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪) High ISO speed noise reduction‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪١٥٥‬‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪) Auto Lighting Optimizer‬ﻣ ّ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪١٥٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪) Auto focus/Drive :٣‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪) AF-assist beam firing‬ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪((AF‬‬
‫‪) AF during Live View shooting‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬
‫‪) Mirror lockup‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ(‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪١٥٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪) Operation/Others :٤‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪) Shutter/AE lock button‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪/‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪((AE‬‬
‫‪) SET button when shooting‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SET‬ﺿﺒﻂ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬
‫‪) LCD display when power ON‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪) Add original decision data‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪١٥٨‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪١٥٩‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪) .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ (.‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ ٢/١-٧‬ﻭﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪ ،(AE‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪.١-٩‬‬
‫‪١٥٣‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٢‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٣‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٤‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪١‬‬
‫‪:0‬‬
‫‪ ١/٣) 1/3-stop‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ(‬
‫‪:1‬‬
‫‪ ١/٢) 1/2-stop‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ(‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٢/١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AEB‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ١/٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪٢-‬‬
‫‪:0‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Av‬‬
‫)ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬
‫‪) Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٠٠/١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﻼﺋﻢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪:1‬‬
‫)‪ ١/٢٥٠) 1/200 sec. (fixed‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ((‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <f‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ١/٢٠٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺩﺍﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻠﻖ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻣًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪(.‬‬
‫‪١٥٤‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٢‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٣‬‬
‫‪:0‬‬
‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪:1‬‬
‫‪) Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪:2‬‬
‫‪) On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﺵ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻗﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪٢‬؛ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ LCD‬ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء )ﻋﺪﻡ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٤‬‬
‫‪:0‬‬
‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪:1‬‬
‫‪) On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﺵ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ،ISO‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،١‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻭﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٥‬‬
‫‪:0‬‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫‪:1‬‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺒﺎﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪) .‬ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ (.‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﻻ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ 1‬ﻭ‪.73+1‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪١٥٦‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٣‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪.EOS‬‬
‫‪:0‬‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫‪:1‬‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫‪:2‬‬
‫‪) Only external flash emits‬ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ ،EOS‬ﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ]‪) [AF-assist beam firing‬ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ EOS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Disabled‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ ٢/٠-٦‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ ١‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،٢‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.١٠٦ - ١٠٢‬‬
‫‪:0‬‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪) Quick mode :1‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٠٢‬‬
‫‪) Live mode :2‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٠٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٨‬‬
‫‪:0‬‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪:1‬‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺳﻠﺒًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ )ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﺮﻳﺔ(‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٩٤‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٧‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٤‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٩‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪/‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫‪:0‬‬
‫‪) AF/AE lock‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪:1‬‬
‫‪) AE lock/AF‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻣﺮﻳﺤﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ً‬
‫>‪ <A‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪.(AE‬‬
‫‪:2‬‬
‫‪) AF/AF lock, no AE lock‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) AI Servo AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،(AI Servo‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <A‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻋﺎﺋﻖ ﻳﻤﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪:3‬‬
‫‪) AE/AF, no AE lock‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻔﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪AI‬‬
‫‪) Servo AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،(AI Servo‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <A‬ﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ .AI Servo‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭﻙ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SET‬ﺿﺒﻂ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ >‪ .<0‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪:0‬‬
‫‪) LCD monitor On/Off‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪(LCD‬‬
‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻧﻔﺲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫‪:1‬‬
‫‪) Change quality‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ(‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <S‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪:2‬‬
‫‪) Flash exposure compensation‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪:3‬‬
‫‪) Menu display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‬
‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻧﻔﺲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫‪:4‬‬
‫‪١٥٨‬‬
‫‪) Disabled‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪N‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [Live View shoot.‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Enable‬‬
‫)ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .٤‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪١١‬‬
‫‪:0‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪) Display‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪.(٤٢‬‬
‫‪:1‬‬
‫‪) Retain power OFF status‬ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪١٢‬‬
‫‪:0‬‬
‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪:1‬‬
‫‪) On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ )ﺹ ‪ ،(١٣١‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫>‪.<L‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ‪OSK-E3‬‬
‫)ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ‪/‬ﻓﻚ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ‪.OSK-E3‬‬
‫‪١٥٩‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ‪N‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [My Menu settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[9‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪My Menu‬‬
‫‪) [settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Register‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Register‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺖ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫‪) My Menu settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Sort‬ﻓﺮﺯ( ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪:٢‬‬
‫‪) Sort‬ﻓﺮﺯ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Sort‬ﻓﺮﺯ(‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻪ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪،[z‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪) Display from My Menu‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ً [9‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ( ﻭ‪) Delete all items‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ(‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪) [Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪) [Delete all items‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ( ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٠‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺎ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻀﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫>‪ (<o‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺋﻂ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤﺘﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻌﻜﺴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺲ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺺ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻧﻮﺍﻓﺬ ﻧﺎﻃﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ً‬
‫ﻫﺪﻓﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻭﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(٤٦‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ )ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ f/5.6‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ )ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ /f‬ﺃﻛﺒﺮ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‪ .‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻀﺎﻋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٠٦‬‬
‫‪١٦٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪) ACK-E5‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻖ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪.DR-E5‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫‪.DR-E5‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻠﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫‪١٦٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪) RS-60E3‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺴﻠﻚ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻃﻮﻟﻪ ‪ ٦٠‬ﺳﻢ‪ ٢/‬ﻗﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪ RC-1‬ﻭ‪) RC-5‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (٢٢‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٥‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪EOS‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻛﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻤﻌﻨﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻮ ﻳﺸﺒﻪ ً‬
‫ﻓﻼﺷﺎ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ‬
‫‪ .EX‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlit‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪.EX‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlit‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪Macro Lites‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Flash exp. comp‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻭ]‪ [E-TTL II‬ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪ (١١٧‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻓﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ ،EX‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[Shutter sync.‬‬
‫)ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‪(.‬‬
‫‪١٦٦‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Canon‬ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪EX‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EZ/E/EG/ML/TL‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪TTL‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ ،A-TTL‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺄﻗﺼﻰ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<a‬‬
‫)ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ( ﺃﻭ >‪) <f‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ TTL‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺄﻗﺼﻰ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ Canon‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ١/٢٠٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ Canon‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٧‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪) ١‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‬
‫‪) Quality‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ(‬
‫‪) Red-eye On/Off‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء(‬
‫‪) Beep‬ﺻﻔﻴﺮ(‬
‫‪) Shoot w/o card‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪/ 86 / 76 / 84 / 74 / 83 / 73‬‬
‫‪1 / 73+1‬‬
‫‪٦٤‬‬
‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ‪) On /‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪٥٩‬‬
‫‪) On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪) Off /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪١٠٨‬‬
‫‪) On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪) Off /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪١٠٨‬‬
‫‪) Review time‬ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ(‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ( ‪/‬‬
‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ‪) 2 sec. /‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ( ‪ٍ ٤) 4 sec. /‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ( ‪) Hold /‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ(‬
‫‪ٍ ٨) 8 sec.‬‬
‫‪١٠٨‬‬
‫‪) AEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬
‫‪) Flash exp comp‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫‪) Custom WB‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ(‬
‫‪) WB SHIFT/BKT‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫‪) Color space‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ١/٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ ٢± ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ١/٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ ٢± ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫‪٧٩‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪) ٢‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪٩٠‬‬
‫‪ :WB correction‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪ :WB-BKT‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪sRGB / Adobe RGB‬‬
‫‪) Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ‪) Portrait /‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ( ‪/‬‬
‫‪) Landscape‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ( ‪) Neutral /‬ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ( ‪/‬‬
‫‪) Faithful‬ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ( ‪) Monochrome /‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( ‪/‬‬
‫‪) User Def. 1, 2, 3‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪(٣‬‬
‫‪٩٢‬‬
‫‪٩٣‬‬
‫‪٨٧‬‬
‫‪٦٧‬‬
‫‪٨٢‬‬
‫‪٨٥‬‬
‫‪) Dust Delete Data‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫‪١١٩‬‬
‫‪) Protect images‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫‪) Rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‬
‫‪) Erase images‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫‪) Print order‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫‪) Transfer order‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ(‬
‫‪) Histogram‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(‬
‫‪) Auto Play‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫‪) Brightness‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ( ‪RGB /‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪١٢٩‬‬
‫‪١٢٦‬‬
‫‪١٣٠‬‬
‫‪١٤٣‬‬
‫‪١٤٩‬‬
‫‪١٣٢‬‬
‫‪١٢٧‬‬
‫‪) Picture Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ [2] ٢‬ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ [7] ٣‬ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ]‪) [9‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ( ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻭ‪.73+1‬‬
‫‪١٦٨‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) ١‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ(‬
‫‪) Auto power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪) File numbering‬ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ(‬
‫‪) Auto rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪) Format‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‬
‫‪) LCD off/on btn‬ﺯﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪(LCD‬‬
‫‪) Screen color‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪30 sec. / 1min./ 2 min. / 4 min. / 8 min. /‬‬
‫‪ ٣٠)15 min. / Off‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ /‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪ /‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﺎﻥ ‪/‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ‪ ٨ /‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ‪ ١٥ /‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪) Continuous‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ( ‪) Auto reset /‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ‪) Manual reset /‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‬
‫‪) On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪) On / PD‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪) Off / D‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫‪) Shutter btn.‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ( ‪ Shutter/DISP /‬ﺯﺭ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪) Remains on / (DISP/‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫‪١٠٩‬‬
‫‪١١٠‬‬
‫‪١١٢‬‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫‪١١٥‬‬
‫‪١١٥‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) ٢‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ(‬
‫‪١٠٩‬‬
‫‪) LCD brightness‬ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ (LCD‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ( ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ‪٢٩‬‬
‫‪) Date/Time‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪) Language‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ(‬
‫‪١٢٨‬‬
‫‪NTSC/PAL‬‬
‫‪) Video system‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫‪) Auto cleaning‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ‪) Clean now /‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ( ‪١١٨‬‬
‫‪) Sensor cleaning‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ(‬
‫‪١٢١‬‬
‫‪) Clean manually‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‬
‫‪) Live View shooting‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬
‫‪) Grid display / Live View function settings‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ( ‪٩٦ Metering timer /‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬
‫)ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪) Flash control‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫‪) Flash firing‬ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ‪Built-in flash function /‬‬
‫‪) setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ( ‪External flash /‬‬
‫‪) function setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ( ‪١١٦ External /‬‬
‫‪) flash C.Fn setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬
‫‪) Clear external flash C.Fn setting /‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) ٣‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ(‬
‫)‪CUstom FUnctions (C.Fn‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻴﻔﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﺎء‬
‫‪١٥٢‬‬
‫‪) Clear settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‬
‫‪) Clear all camera settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( )‪) Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn‬ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬
‫‪١١٤‬‬
‫‪) Firmware Ver.‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫‪) My Menu settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ )ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ(‬
‫‪١٦٠‬‬
‫‪١٦٩‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫‪ :o‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪ :k‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪RAW‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪73 +RAW‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫‪sRGB‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪Adobe RGB‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪١٧٠‬‬
‫‪f s‬‬
‫‪8 a‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪AI Servo‬‬
‫‪AI Focus‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫‪ :o‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪ :k‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫‪f s‬‬
‫‪8 a‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪١٧١‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺭﺟﻊ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(٢٦‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(٢٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(٢٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(٣١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪) .<B‬ﺹ ‪(٤٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ﻟﺜﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﻌﺖ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻀﻲء‪/‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(٢٤‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎء ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [5Auto power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [5Auto power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪١٧٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(٣١‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻹﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ ٣١‬ﻭ‪(١٣٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) One-Shot AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪) .‬ﺹ‪ ٣٧‬ﻭ‪(٦٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) Write/Erase‬ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪/‬ﻣﺴﺢ(‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(٣١‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻠﺘﺼﻘﺔ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻓﺎﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ً LCD‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(٣٣‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪ ٣٦‬ﻭ‪(٣٧‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪.١٧٥‬‬
‫ﺿﺠﻴﺠﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ُﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺁﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻧﺒﺜﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﻲء‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(١٢٩‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻭﻗﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(٢٩‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )ﺹ ‪.(١٢٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪ (NTSC/PAL‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(١٦٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(١٢٨‬‬
‫‪١٧٤‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺛﺖ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪) ٠٢‬ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺄﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫‪RS-60E3‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪EF‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪EF-S‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪VC-100‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫‪EOS DIGITAL‬‬
‫‪Solution Disk‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪IFC-200U‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪IFC-500U‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫‪Windows Vista‬‬
‫‪Windows XP‬‬
‫‪Windows 2000‬‬
‫‪Mac OS X‬‬
‫‪١٧٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪OSK-E3‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪PCMCIA‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪SD‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪EP-EX15ll‬‬
‫‪Macro Twin Lite‬‬
‫‪MT-24EX‬‬
‫‪220EX 430EX 580EX II Macro Ring Lite‬‬
‫‪MR-14EX‬‬
‫‪ST-E2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻲ ‪Ef‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪E‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ‪Ef‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫‪EW-100DB lll‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪LP-E5‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪C‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺷﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ‬
‫‪EH19-L‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ACK-E5‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LC-E5‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪LC-E5E‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪BG-E5‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫‪DR-E5‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪CA-PS700‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ‪CBC-E5‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪BGM-E5A‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪AA‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪BGM-E5L‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ‪LP-E5‬‬
‫‪١٧٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )‪ (AF/AE‬ﻣﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ ،SD‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪SDHC‬‬
‫‪ ٢٢٫٢‬ﻣﻠﻢ × ‪ ١٤٫٨‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ EF‬ﻣﻦ ‪) Canon‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪) (EF-S‬ﺍﻟﺒُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ‬
‫ﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١,٦‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ‪ EF‬ﻣﻦ ‪Canon‬‬
‫• ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪ CMOS‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪ ١٠٫١٠ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‪ ١٠٫٥٠ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪٢:٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) RGB‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺃﺯﺭﻕ(‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫• ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪:‬‬
‫‪RAW+JPEG‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٢٫٠‬‬
‫‪) JPEG، RAW‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ١٢‬ﺑﺖ(‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫‪ ٣٫٨ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ )‪ ٢٥٩٢ × ٣٨٨٨‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ )‪ ٢٥٩٢ × ٣٨٨٨‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ ٢٫٣ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ )‪ ١٨٨٠ × ٢٨١٦‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪/‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٫٢ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ )‪ ١٨٨٠ × ٢٨١٦‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫)‪ (٤‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪/‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ ١٫٣ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ )‪ ١٢٨٨ × ١٩٣٦‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫)‪ (٥‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٠٫٧ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ )‪ ١٢٨٨ × ١٩٣٦‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫)‪ (٦‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪/‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ ٩٫٨ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ )‪ ٢٥٩٢ × ٣٨٨٨‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫)‪RAW (٧‬‬
‫* ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ٍ‬
‫• ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪:‬‬
‫‪١٧٨‬‬
‫‪Adobe RGB ،sRGB‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪٣ - ١‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻇﻞ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺠﺴﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺿﻮء ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ٩± :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ٣± :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬
‫*ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ :‬ﻣ ّ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ‪(OSK-E3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪:‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺁﺓ ﺧﻤﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ٪٩٥‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٠٫٨١‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )‪ ١-‬ﻡ‪ ١-‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺎ ﻻﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪ ٢١‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪ ١٫٠+ - ٣٫٠‬ﻡ‪(dpt) ١-‬‬‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﻣﺮﺁﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ )ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪:‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ،٦٠:٤٠‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ EF600mm f/4L IS USM‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﺮ(‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪) (AF‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪،(AF‬‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ ،(AE‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪ ،(FE‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻱ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ ،TTL‬ﻭﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪:(AF‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ١٨ - ٠٫٥ :‬ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻥ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ °٢٣‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ °٧٣/‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‪(ISO 100 ،‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،AI Servo‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،AI Focus‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )‪(MF‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪:(AF‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ )‪ :(AF‬ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺷﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪:(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‪ ٤ :‬ﻡ‪ ١٣،١/‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ٣,٥ ،‬ﻡ‪ ١١,٥/‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫‪١٧٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ(‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ‪ TTL‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ )ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪((AF‬‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ )‪ ٪١٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ(‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻥ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ‪) ٢٠ - ١‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ °٢٣‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ °٧٣/‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪(ISO 100 ،EF50mm f/1.4 USM‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻟﻌﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪E-TTL II‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ ISO 100 - 800‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪ISO 100 - 1600 :‬‬
‫)ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ ٢± :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ٣/١‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٢/١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫)ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪((AEB‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ ٢± :(AEB‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ٣/١‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٢/١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ :‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫‪ ١/٤٠٠٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١/٦٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ‪ X‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ١/١٢٠٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ١/٤٠٠٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ )ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻛﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺳﻠﺲ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺴﺤﺐ ﻳﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪E-TTL II‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪:‬‬
‫‪) ١٣/٤٣‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO 100‬ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻡ(‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪ٍ ٣‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪:‬‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١٧‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٢±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ١/٣‬ﺃﻭ ‪١/٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪ :(FE‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫‪١٨٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪EX-series Speedlite‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪E-TTL II‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٢±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ١/٣‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ١/٢‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪ :(FE‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ )‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ(‬
‫‪:JPEG‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫‪ ١٫٥‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫‪:RAW‬‬
‫‪:73+RAW‬‬
‫*** ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫‪) JPEG‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ(‪ ** :‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ** :RAW ،‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪،‬‬
‫‪) RAW+JPEG‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ(‪ ** :‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫* ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ Canon‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO 100‬ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫* ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ‬
‫• ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪(EOS Utility‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻥ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ‪) ٢٠ - ٠‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ °٢٣‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ °٧٣/‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪(EF50mm f/1.4 USM ،ISO 100‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‬
‫• ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ TFT‬ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫‪ ٢٫٥‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٣٠٫٠٠٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٪١٠٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪١٨١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ‪ ٧‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‪:‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪ +‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺨﻄﻂ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٩‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٫٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ١/١٠/١٠٠‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ )ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ(‬
‫• ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫• ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫‪:DPOF‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪١٫١‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ‪RAW‬‬
‫* ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ"‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١٢‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻛﺈﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ )‪ USB‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ(‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ‪:USB‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪NTSC/PAL‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪:‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪RS-60E3‬‬
‫• ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪١٨٢‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪) LP-E5‬ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ‪(١‬‬
‫* ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ACK-E5‬‬
‫* ﻣﻊ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ،BG-E5‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪AA‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫]ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ • ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ[‬
‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪٪٥٠‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ °٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪/‬‬
‫‪ °٧٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪٦٠٠‬‬
‫‪٥٠٠‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ °٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪/‬‬
‫‪ °٣٢‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪٥٠٠‬‬
‫‪٤٠٠‬‬
‫* ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ‪LP-E5‬‬
‫* ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪) CIPA‬ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ‪ ٤‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ‬
‫‪ ٠٫١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ً‬
‫)ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪) CIPA‬ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ((‬
‫• ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‪ ٦١٫٩ × ٩٧٫٥ × ١٢٦٫١ :‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٢٫٤ × ٣٫٨ × ٥ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ ٤٥٠‬ﺟﻢ ‪ ١٥٫٩ /‬ﺃﻭﻗﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ °٠ :‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ °٤٠ -‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ °٣٢ /‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ‪ °١٠٤ -‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ٪٨٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LP-E5‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٧٫٤‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤُﻘﺪﺭ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١٠٨٠‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‪ ٥٣٫١ × ١٤٫٧ × ٣٦ :‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٢٫١ × ٠٫٦ × ١٫٤ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﺟﻢ ‪ ١٫٨ /‬ﺃﻭﻗﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LC-E5‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LP-E5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٢٤٠ - ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ )‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤُﻘﺪﺭ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫٤‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪ ٧٠٠ /‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤُﻘﺪﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ °٠ :‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ °٤٠ -‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ °٣٢ /‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ‪ °١٠٤ -‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ٪٨٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‪ ٨٧٫٥ × ٢٦ × ٦٧ :‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٣٫٤ × ١ × ٢٫٦ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٨٠‬ﺟﻢ ‪ ٢٫٨ /‬ﺃﻭﻗﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫‪١٨٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LC-E5E‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LP-E5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻡ ‪ ٦٫٦ /‬ﺃﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٢٤٠ - ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ )‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤُﻘﺪﺭ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫٤‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪ ٧٠٠ /‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤُﻘﺪﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪°٤٠ - °٠ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ °١٠٤ - °٣٢ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ٪٨٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‪ ٨٧٫٥ × ٢٦ × ٦٧ :‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٣٫٤ × ١ × ٢٫٦ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٧٥‬ﺟﻢ ‪ ٢٫٦ /‬ﺃﻭﻗﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫• ‪EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS‬‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺮ × ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻱ‪´٥٠°٢٧ - ´٢٠°٧٤ :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪´٢٠°٢٣ - ´٣٠°٦٤ :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪´٤٠°١٥ - ´٣٠°٤٥ :‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ‪ ٩‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪f/22 - 36‬‬
‫‪ ٠٫٢٥‬ﻡ ‪ ٠٫٨٢ /‬ﻗﺪﻡ )ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫‪ ٠٫٣٤‬ﻣﺮﺓ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪ ٥٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ(‬
‫‪ ٤٥ × ٦٧ - ١٣٤ × ٢٠٧‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ١٫٨ × ٢٫٦ - ٥٫٣ × ٨٫١ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
‫)ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٠٫٢٥‬ﻡ(‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪ ٥٨‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫‪ ٧٠ × ٦٨٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٢٫٨ × ٢٫٧ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٠٠‬ﺟﻢ ‪ ٧٫١ /‬ﺃﻭﻗﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪EW-60C‬‬
‫‪LP814‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣُﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ ،Canon‬ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ Adobe‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Adobe Systems Incorporated‬‬
‫‪ Windows‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Microsoft Corporation‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Macintosh‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS‬ﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Apple Inc.‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ SDHC‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﺨﺺ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ 2.0‬ﻭﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪) Exif 2.21‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳُﻌﺮﻑ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ‬
‫"‪ .("Exif Print‬ﻭ‪ Exif Print‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،Exif Print‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﻭﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻮﻓﺎﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ‬
‫• ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺐ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﻊ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻣﻌﺪﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺨﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ُ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺑﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻌﻜﺴﺔ )‪ .(- +‬ﻻ ﺗﻤﺰﺝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ °٠‬ﻭ‪°٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬‫)ﻭﺑﻴﻦ ‪°٣٢‬ﻭ‪°١٠٤‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺑﺘﻠﻊ ﻃﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﺒًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪) .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻌﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﻌﺎء‪(.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺰﻝ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﻼﻣﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﺨﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﺸﻮﻫﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺑﺨﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﺰﻋﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗُﺼﺎﺏ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻣﻨﻊ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻠﺪﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﺑﺴﻚ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻭﻻﻣﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻠﺪﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﺑﺴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻐﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺄﺛﺮﺓ ﺑﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﻜﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻨﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻋﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺼﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻌﺮﺿﻪ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﺩ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺤﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺸﺨﺺ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻄﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ١‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺑﻴﻨﻚ ﻭﺑﻴﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻏﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٦‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺳﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻨﻚ ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻧﺘﺠﺖ ﺗﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮء ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺣﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺼﺎﺭ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻨﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ّ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺣﺎ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻌﺜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻗﻢ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺄﻳ ٍﺪ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺨﺪﺵ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻨﻴﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺮﻁ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺷﻲء ﺛﻘﻴﻞ ﻓﻮﻗﻪ‪ً .‬‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺑﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬‫ﺳﻠﻜﺎ ﻣﺎﺩﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻤﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﺟﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻮﺛﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺭﻃﺒﺔ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﺮ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺨﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑ ﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ٍ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺒًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺮﻳﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻣﺴﺒﺒﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻐﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﻮﻕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻘﻤﺎﺵ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺣﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺳﻘﻄﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺷﻈﺎﻳﺎ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺣﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﺮﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻗﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺨﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﻫﺎﻥ )ﺛﻨﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﻼء( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﻼﺣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻄﻠﺐ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪١٨٧‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪DS126191‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺓ ‪ ١٥‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻟﺠﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﺭﺍﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺨﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻃﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﻴﻦ‪(١) :‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺿﺎﺭ ﻭ)‪ (٢‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻟﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺏ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺓ ‪١٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻟﺠﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﺭﺍﻟﻴﺔ )‪ .(FCC‬ﺗﻤﺖ ﺻﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻘﻮﻟﺔ ﺿﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺯﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻮﻟّﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺿﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺿﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫— ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫— ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫— ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫— ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪/‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺏ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺏ ﻟﻠﻔﻘﺮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ١٥‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻟﺠﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﺭﺍﻟﻴﺔ )‪.(FCC‬‬
‫ﻳُﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﻌﺪﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳُﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪Canon U.S.A. Inc.‬‬
‫‪One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺭﻗﻢ‪(٥١٦)٣٢٨-٥٦٠٠ :‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺏ ﻣﻊ ‪ ICES-003‬ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺪﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ ACK-E5‬ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤُﻘﺪﺭ‪ ٢٤٠ - ١٠٠ :‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪٥٠/٦٠‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤُﻘﺪﺭ‪ ١٢٫٦ :‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٨‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ — ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ LC-E5‬ﻭ‪.LC-E5E‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ )‪ (١‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪(٢) ،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ (٣) ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ — ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ .LP-E5‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﺠﺮ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﺒﺔ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪،‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﻮﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺸﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﺴﻠﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﻴﻦ ‪ -‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺂﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٩‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺟﺊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻘﻮﻃﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ؛ ﺑﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺄﺧﺬﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٠‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ؛ ﺑﻞ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺧﺬﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١١‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻫﻞ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﻛﻨﺪﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‪/‬ﺑﻮﻟﻴﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑـ ‪1-800-8-BATTERY‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻜﻨﺪﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺮﻛﻠﻮﺭﻳﺖ – ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪١٩٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪) A-DEP‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪٧٦ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻦ )ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( ‪٨٤ ...........................‬‬
‫‪٨٧ .....................................Adobe RGB‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ‪١١٩ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ‪٤٠ ............................................‬‬
‫‪) AEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ‪٨٠ ..............‬‬
‫‪) Av‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‪٧٢ ....‬‬
‫‪) M‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ(‪٧٥ ................................‬‬
‫‪) MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ( ‪٦٢ ...........................‬‬
‫‪) P‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( ‪٥٦ .......................‬‬
‫ﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ )ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‪٨٤ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ ‪ /‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ‪ /‬ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ‪ /‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ‪٨٤ ............................................‬‬
‫‪١٣٣ ..................................... PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫‪٦٦ ،٦٤ ......................................... RAW‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪٢٩ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫‪٦٦ ،٦٤ ..................................7L+RAW‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪٨٣ .................................................‬‬
‫‪) Tv‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‪٧٠ ...........‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪٨٩ ......................... (FE‬‬
‫‪WB‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪٨٨ ...................... (AE‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪٤٦ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺃ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ‪١١٨ ،٣٤ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪١١٤ ...............‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ‪٧٠ ..................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪٧٢ ...........‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ ‪٧٥ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪٢٤ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ )ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪١٣٦ .........................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪٦٤ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‪٦٤ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ‪١٨٦ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪١٢٦ ،١١٢ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﺃﺳﻴﺔ ‪١١٢ ....................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(‪١٤٩ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‬
‫‪7L+RAW‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪٨٣ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪٩٤ ،٣٧ ،٣٥ ...........................‬‬
‫ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪٣٥ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪٩٥ .....................‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪١٠٩ ،٢٧ ......................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪١٥٧ ،١٠٢ .....................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪١٠٠ ................................‬‬
‫ﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‪٦٩ ،٥٥ ،٢٠ ........................‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪٥٦ .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪٣١ ،١٣ ،٢ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪١٠٨ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪٤٣ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ‪٦٣ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪١٦٤ ..........‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ‪٤٩ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪١١٦ ،٧٩ ...............‬‬
‫‪١٩١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ٢/١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪١٥٤ .....................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪٧٨ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ١/٢‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪١٥٤ .....................‬‬
‫ﺥ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺩ )ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ( ‪٢٥ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ‪١٧٥ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪٥٦ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﺵ‪١٥٥ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ‪ /‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪٨٣ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ‪٥٩ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪٨٣ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ‪٣٤ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪٩٠ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ ‪٤٤ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‪١٣١ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ )ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪١٤١ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪١١٠ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ‪٤٠ ...............................‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ‪ /‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ /‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪٤١ .............................‬‬
‫ﺭﻳﺎﺿﺔ‪٥٠ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪٩٠ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ‪٩٣ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪٩٢ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪٣٤ ........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪٩٠ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪٣٧ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺝ‬
‫ﺱ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪١٧٠ ............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪١٥٦ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪٥٧ ..........................................ISO‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٦٤ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﺵ ‪١٥٥ ..................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٨٥ ،٨٢ ،٦٧ .........................‬‬
‫ﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪٦٥ ،٦٤ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‪٢٢ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ‪٦٨ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ )ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪١٢٩ .................‬‬
‫‪١٩٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪١٣ ..........................................LCD‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ‪١٠٩ .................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٤٢ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٥٤ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪٣٨ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪١١٥ ،٤٢ .............................‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪١١٥ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ‪١٠٨ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪٦٨ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ‪٦٨ ............................‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪٥١ .................................‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ‪٦٧ ،٥١ ،٤٧ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪١٢٧ ................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ‪١٣٠ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ‪١٣١ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪١٣٢ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪١٢٤ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪١٢٥ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪٤٥ ....(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ )‪١٦٢ ............................ (AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪١٠٢ ،٩٨ .........‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪٦٢ ............................‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪١٦٢ ،٤٥ ......................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪٤٦ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ‪٧٧ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ ﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪٧٧ ......................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪٣٦ ........................‬‬
‫ﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ‪١٢٦ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪١٦٣ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪١٢٣ ،٥٤ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪١٢٩ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪١٠٩ ،٢٧ ...................‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ‪١٠٨ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪٢٦ ،٢٤ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ‪١٢٦ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪٢٨ ..................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪١٣١ .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ‪١٦٣ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‪١٤٧ ....................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪١٠٠ ،٢٨ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪١٢٨ ...........................‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪٢٧ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺽ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪٦٠ ......... AI Focus‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪٦٠ .............. Servo‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪٦٠ .....................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪٦٠ ............ (AF‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪٦١ ... (AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪١٣٣ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪١٣٧ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ‪١٣٧ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪١٤٣ ....................(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪١٤٠ ،١٣٨ .......................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ‪١٤١ .........................................‬‬
‫‪١٩٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪٣٣ ،١٦ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪١٦٨ ................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ‪١٦٠ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪١٢٧ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪٣٨ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪١٢٥ ..............................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪١٦٠ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪١٢٤ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ )ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪١٥٩ .............‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ‪١٢٦ ،٩٨ ...............................‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪١٢٨ ................................‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪١٥٧ ،٩٤ .....................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪١٢٨ ................(NTSC/PAL‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪١٣١ .........................‬‬
‫ﻋﻄﻞ ‪١٧٢ ................................................‬‬
‫ﻍ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ‪١٦٥ ،٢٢ .........................‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪١١٤ .........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪٣٦ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٤٧ .....................................‬‬
‫ﻑ‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪٢٨ .......................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪١٣١ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪١٤٩ ...................................‬‬
‫ﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪٥٨ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ‪٣٠ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪١١٦ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ‪١٠٠ ،٢٨ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‪٥٨ .....................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪١٦٦ ،١١٧ .......‬‬
‫ﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ ‪٦٨ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪٨٩ .....................(FE‬‬
‫ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( ‪٣٥ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪١١٦ ،٧٩ ...........‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪١١٠ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪٥٢ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪١١٦ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪١٦ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪٥٩ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪١٦ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ١/٢٠٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪١٥٤ .......‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪٢٠ ............................‬‬
‫ﻕ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ ‪٣ ..........................‬‬
‫‪١٩٤‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪١٨ ................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪١٩ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪١٥٦ ............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪١٣٢ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ‪RGB /‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪١٧٦ ......................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪٨٧ ........................................‬‬
‫‪sRGB / Adobe RGB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ‪٨٢ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪٦٧ ............................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪٨٥ .........................................‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪٦٣ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ‪١١٨ ،٢٧ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪٤٩ ،١٦ ...................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪٥٣ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪١٩ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٢٠ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ‪٣٦ ...................‬‬
‫‪٧٦ ........................................ A-DEP‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪١٦٥ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪٧٢ .......‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪١٣٠ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ‪٤٩ ............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ‪١٧٢ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪٥٢ .....................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ‪٣٢ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ ‪٤٤ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪٧٥ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪٤٨ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﺵ ‪١٥٥ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ ‪٧٥ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‪٩٣ ،٨٠ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ ‪٥١ ............................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ‪٧٤ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪٤٧ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ ‪٧٧ ................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪٥٦ .........................‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪٦٢ ،٣٣ .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪٧٠ ..............‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ‪٦٤ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪١١٠ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪٦٤ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻳﺎﺿﺔ‪٥٠ ............................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪٧٧ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ ‪ /‬ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ‪ /‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪١٥٢ ...............................‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ‪٦٧ ،٤٨ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪٥٣ ........................................‬‬
‫‪١٩٥‬‬
CANON INC. 30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
U.S.A.
CANON U.S.A. INC.
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042-1198, U.S.A.
For all inquires concerning this product, call toll free in the U.S.
1-800-OK-CANON
CANADA
CANON CANADA INC. HEADQUARTERS
6390 Dixie Road, Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1P7, Canada
CANON CANADA INC. MONTREAL BRANCH
5990, Côte-de-Liesse, Montréal Québec H4T 1V7, Canada
CANON CANADA INC. CALGARY OFFICE
2828, 16th Street, N.E. Calgary, Alberta T2E 7K7, Canada
For all inquiries concerning this product, call toll free in Canada
1-800-OK-CANON
EUROPE,
AFRICA &
MIDDLE EAST
CANON EUROPA N.V.
Bovenkerkerweg 59-61, P.O. Box 2262, 1180 EG Amstelveen, The Netherlands
CANON COMMUNICATION & IMAGE FRANCE S.A.S.
12 Rue de l’Industrie 92414 Courbevoie Cedex, France
CANON UK LTD.
Woodhatch Reigate Surrey RH2 8BF, United Kingdom
CANON DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
Europark Fichtenhain A10, 47807 Krefeld, Germany
CANON ITALIA S.p.A.
Via Milano 8 I-20097 San Donato Milanese, Milano, Italy
CANON Schweiz AG
Geschäftsbereich Wiederverkauf, Industriestrasse 12, CH-8305 Dietlikon, Switzerland
CANON GMBH
Zetschegasse 11, A-1230 Wien, Austria
CANON España, S. A.
C/Joaquín Costa, 41, 28002 Madrid, Spain
SEQUE Soc. Nac. de Equip., Lda.,
Praça da Alegria, 58, 2°, 1269-149 Lisboa, Portugal
CENTRAL &
SOUTH AMERICA
CANON LATIN AMERICA, INC.
703 Waterford Way, Ste. 400 Miami, FL 33126, U.S.A.
ASIA
CANON (China) Co., Ltd.
15F Jinbao Building No.89 Jinbao Street, Dongcheng District, Beijing 100005, China
CANON HONGKONG CO., LTD.
19/F., The Metropolis Tower, 10 Metropolis Drive, Hunghom, Kowloon, Hong Kong
CANON SINGAPORE PTE. LTD.
1 HarbourFront Avenue, #04-01 Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632
CANON KOREA CONSUMER IMAGING INC.
Startower Bldg.17F,737,Yeoksam-Dong, Kangnam-Ku, Seoul, 135-984, Korea
OCEANIA
CANON AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
1 Thomas Holt Drive, North Ryde, N.S.W. 2113, Australia
CANON NEW ZEALAND LTD.
Akoranga Business Park, Akoranga Drive, Northcote, Auckland, New Zealand
JAPAN
CANON MARKETING JAPAN INC.
16-6, Kohnan 2-chome, Minato-ku, Tokyo 108-8011, Japan
This Instruction Manual booklet is current as of May 2008. For information on the
camera’s compatibility with any accessories and lenses introduced after this date,
contact any Canon Service Center.
CT1-1022-000
© CANON INC. 2008
PRINTED IN JAPAN
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising